Jeep 2014 Patriot Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Jeep Jeep-2014-Jeep-Patriot-Owners-Manual-817400 jeep-2014-jeep-patriot-owners-manual-817400 jeep pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 568 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Patriot
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014 Patriot
14MK74-126-AG Seventh Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2014
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or
optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no
longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment de-
scribed in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to
or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products pre-
viously manufactured.
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1INTRODUCTION .............................................................3
2THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE .............................9
3UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ............................101
4UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ..................................209
5STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................315
6WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ..............................................433
7MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ...............................................471
8MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES .................................................525
9IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ........................................533
10 INDEX ....................................................................545
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵INTRODUCTION ........................4
䡵ROLLOVER WARNING ...................4
䡵HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............5
䡵WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ..............7
䡵VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........7
䡵VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....8
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide
variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe man-
ner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher
center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll
over when some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
4 INTRODUCTION
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro-
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
Rollover Warning Label
1
INTRODUCTION 5
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also is stamped into the
right front body, on the right front seat crossmember
under the carpet and the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
8 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12
▫Ignition Key Removal ...................12
▫Locking Doors With A Key................14
▫Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................14
䡵SENTRY KEY® .........................15
▫Replacement Keys .....................16
▫Customer Key Programming ..............17
▫General Information ....................18
䡵
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .18
▫To Arm The System .....................19
▫Rearming The System ...................19
▫To Disarm The System...................19
▫Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override ......20
䡵REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................20
▫To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........21
▫Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First
Press...............................21
▫Illuminated Approach — If Equipped ........22
▫To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............22
2
▫Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock .........22
▫Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock . . .23
▫Using The Panic Alarm ..................24
▫Programming Additional Transmitters........25
▫Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........25
▫General Information ....................26
䡵REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................26
▫How To Use Remote Start ................27
䡵DOOR LOCKS .........................30
▫Manual Door Locks .....................30
▫Power Door Locks .....................31
▫Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ..........................34
䡵POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED ........35
▫Power Window Switches .................35
▫Auto-Down ..........................37
▫Window Lockout Switch .................37
䡵LIFTGATE ............................38
䡵OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS ................39
▫Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................43
▫Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .48
▫Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt
Operating Instructions ...................49
▫Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .....52
▫Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ......52
▫Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped ..........................53
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫Seat Belt Pretensioners ..................54
▫Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .55
▫Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) ..........................59
▫Seat Belt Extender .....................60
▫Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ...........60
▫Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags ............................61
▫Advanced Front Air Bag Features ...........63
▫Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls ....67
▫Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............75
▫Child Restraints .......................76
䡵ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....95
䡵SAFETY TIPS ..........................96
▫Transporting Passengers..................96
▫Exhaust Gas ..........................97
▫Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................98
▫Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................100
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys. Ask your
authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a
safe place.
Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
2. Place the ignition in the ACC (Accessory) position.
3. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to
the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
Vehicle Key
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
shift lever in PARK, the key may become trapped tem-
porarily in the ignition switch cylinder. If this occurs,
place the shift lever in PARK, rotate the key clockwise
slightly, then remove the key as described above. If a
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
WARNING!
•Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK and re-
move the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK 3 — ON/RUN
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 4 — START
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
WARNING! (Continued)
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
•Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn
the key to the left. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC, sounds a
signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: With the driver’s door open and the key in the
ignition, the power door locks will not lock and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will not function.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unau-
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
Either of these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key® is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys® from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Du-
plication of keys may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys®, you can program
new Sentry Keys® to the system by performing the
following procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key® Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at
least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position
and remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will
sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key® into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime
will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will
stop flashing. To indicate that programming is com-
plete, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for
three seconds and then turn off.
The new Sentry Key® is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro-
grammed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key®, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be repro-
grammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate,
and ignition switch for unauthorized operation.
When the alarm is activated, the interior switches for
door locks are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm
provides both audio and visual signals, the horn will
sound, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals
will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance
is still present (driver’s door, passenger door, other doors,
ignition) after three minutes, the parking lights and tail
lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door LOCK
switch or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
and close all doors.
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds. This
shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming.
During this period, if a door is opened, the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN, or the power door locks
are unlocked in any manner, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will automatically disarm. After approximately
16 seconds, the Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly.
This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully
armed.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
To Disarm The System
Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter, or insert the key
into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to
the ON/RUN position.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering. The Vehicle
Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle;
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
however, you can create conditions where the Vehicle
Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in
the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter,
once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed (after 16
seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
Three Button RKE Transmitter
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
•For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans-
mitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position
and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
•For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10
seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still
holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
•For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
•For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK
button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans-
mitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position
and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE:
Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to move
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key® “Customer Key Programming”.
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the
two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure
not to damage the elastomer seal during removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
Separating Case Halves
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE: If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
reinstall and tighten the screw until snug.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m). Obstructions between the
vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•Shift lever in PARK
•Doors closed
•Hood closed
•Hazard switch off
•Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•Battery at an acceptable charge level
•RKE PANIC button not pressed
•System not disabled from previous remote start event
•Vehicle theft alarm not active
WARNING!
•Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
•Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
•Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
•Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
•Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
•Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
•Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start
Press and release the REMOTE START button on
the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.
The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights
will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
•The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
•The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
•Any engine warning lamps come on
•Low Fuel Light turns on
•The hood is opened
•The hazard switch is pressed
•The transmission is moved out of PARK
•The brake pedal is pressed
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock knob to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the lock knob is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
•For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, a child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Manual Door Lock Knob
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on the driver’s and
front passenger’s door panel. Press this switch to lock or
unlock the doors and liftgate.
NOTE: To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle,
the power door lock switch will not operate when the key
is in the ignition and either front door is open. A chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the key.
Driver Power Door Lock Switch
1 — Unlock
2 — Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Auto Lock Doors — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Lock Doors Programming
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
•For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
•For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
switch.
2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four
times ending up in the LOCK position (do not start the
engine).
3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door LOCK switch
to lock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE:
•If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
did not enter the programming mode and you will
need to repeat the procedure.
•Use the Automatic Door Lock feature in accordance
with local laws.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
•
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
•The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
•The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
•The driver’s door is opened.
•The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
•For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK five
times ending up in the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door UNLOCK
switch to unlock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE:
•If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
did not enter the programming mode and you will
need to repeat the procedure.
•Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in
accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
Power Window Switches
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
control all the door windows. There are single window
controls on each passenger door trim panel, which oper-
ate the passenger door windows. The window controls
will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
or ACC position.
NOTE:
•For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Open-
ing either front door will cancel this feature.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
Power Window Switch Location
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down
The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically. To
cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in
either the up or down direction and release the switch.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window LOCKOUT switch. To enable the window con-
trols, press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time.
Window Lockout Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
LIFTGATE
NOTE: The key that is used to start the vehicle is also
used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.
To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and
turn to the right (manual lock models only). The liftgate
can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed
without using the key. To open the liftgate, squeeze the
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion. NOTE: Although the liftgate has no inside release
mechanism, the liftgate trim panel includes an opening
with a snap-in cap that provides access to release the
latch in the event of an electrical system malfunction.
Opening The Liftgate
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
•If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
•
Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
•Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint)
•Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
•Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if
equipped
•An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
•Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
•Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
•All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat — if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
•Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
•Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
•In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
•Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the belt will
lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING! (Continued)
•Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
•Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the
back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
WARNING!
•A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
•A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING! (Continued)
•A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
Positioning Lap Belt
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
•A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi-
ately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-
tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push the anchorage button to release the
anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that
fits you best.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pressing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position. As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center lap/shoulder belt features a
three-point seat belt with a mini-latch and buckle, which
allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor
when the seat is folded. The mini-buckle and shoulder
belt can then be stored out of the way in the right side
trim panel for added convenience.
1. Remove the mini-latch and regular latch from its
stowed position in the right rear side trim panel. 2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the belt over the
seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
restraint.
Mini-Latch Stowage
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
4. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini-
latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click”.
5. Sit back in the seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go
around your lap.
6. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt
Connecting Mini-Latch To Buckle
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-
tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
9. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled Detaching Mini-Latch And Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
10. To disengage the mini-latch from the mini-buckle for
storage, insert the regular latch plate into the black
button on the top of the mini-buckle. The belt will
automatically retract to its stowed position. If neces-
sary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate into
the slot provided in the trim panel.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to Child Restraints under
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver Center Passenger
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second
Row
ALR ALR ALR
•N/A — Not Applicable
•ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click⬙.
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly re-
strained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
•The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
•Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu-
pants, including those in child restraints.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-
ity and type of the impact.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver ’s and
front passenger’s seat before driving. You can recognize
when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the
fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step
three of the resetting procedure).
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
2 — Seatback 4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
Review Table Below AHR In Reset Position
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
•For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho-
rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert®.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
tions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bags are certified to new Federal regulations.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the side air bags is labeled SRS AIRBAG.
This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
the outboard side of the front seats.
NOTE:
•Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•Air Bag Warning Light
•Steering Wheel and Column
•Instrument Panel
•Knee Impact Bolsters
•Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
•Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
•Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
•Front and Side Impact Sensors
•Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
— If Equipped
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats. When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll-
over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC air bags deploy
downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
•Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC curtains on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
Side Curtain Air Bag Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
•Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain and/or Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
during deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
•Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the SABIC. The
area where the side curtain air bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SAB; the performance could
be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
•Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially chil-
dren, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the appro-
priate sized child restraint, infant restraint or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the child.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passengers, and position front occupants
for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, and
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
several factors, including the severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on several factors,
including the severity and type of collision. Advanced
Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
•Cut off fuel to the engine.
•Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
•Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•Unlock the doors automatically.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON/RUN to IGN OFF.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller System serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
•The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned on.
•The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight second interval.
•The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer
to Transport Canada’s website for additional information:
•http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and
Toddlers
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing
or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rearward-facing until they reach
the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
•Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
•Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
•Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
•After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
•When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri-
odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?
Yes You can install child restraints with flexible
lower anchors in the center position. The
inner anchorages are 15.5 inches (390 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints with
rigid lower anchors in the center position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? No No head restraint may be removed
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attach-
ments in the center seating position. Only install this type
of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child
restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach-
ments can be installed in any rear seating position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-
Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical in-
stallation instructions.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
•Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
der “Occupant Restraints.”
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
•ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? No
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt
path.
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click”.
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat,
routing it over the center of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Anchorage Locations
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
•If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
•Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
•If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
•Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
•Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
•Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵MIRRORS ............................106
▫Inside Day/Night Mirror ................106
▫Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .107
▫Outside Mirror — Driver Side ............108
▫Outside Mirror — Passenger Side ..........108
▫Folding Outside Mirrors ................108
▫Power Mirrors .......................108
▫Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...........109
▫Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ............110
▫Sun Visor Sliding Feature ...............110
䡵Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED ........110
▫Operation ..........................112
▫Phone Call Features ...................120
▫Uconnect® Phone Features ..............123
▫Advanced Phone Connectivity ............129
▫Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone .....................130
▫General Information ...................142
䡵VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED ........142
▫Voice Command System Operation .........142
3
▫Commands .........................144
▫Voice Training .......................148
䡵SEATS ..............................148
▫Power Seats — If Equipped ..............149
▫Heated Seats — If Equipped .............151
▫Manual Front Seat Adjustment ............152
▫Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped ...........................153
▫Manual Lumbar — If Equipped ...........154
▫Driver’s Seatback Recline ................154
▫
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped . .155
▫Head Restraints ......................156
▫Folding Rear Seat .....................160
▫Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped .........161
䡵TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........162
䡵LIGHTS .............................164
▫Multifunction Lever ...................164
▫Headlights And Parking Lights ...........165
▫Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....165
▫Lights-On Reminder ...................165
▫Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............165
▫Turn Signals .........................166
▫High/Low Beam Switch ................167
▫Flash-To-Pass ........................167
▫Instrument Panel Dimming...............167
▫Map/Reading Lights ...................168
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......169
▫Windshield Wiper Operation .............170
▫Intermittent Wiper System ...............171
▫Windshield Washers ...................171
▫Mist Feature .........................172
䡵TILT STEERING COLUMN ...............172
䡵ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................173
▫To Activate ..........................174
▫To Set A Desired Speed .................175
▫To Deactivate ........................175
▫To Resume Speed .....................175
▫To Vary The Speed Setting ...............175
▫To Accelerate For Passing ................177
䡵GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .177
▫Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .179
▫Programming A Rolling Code .............179
▫Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........182
▫Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......183
▫Using HomeLink® ....................184
▫Security ............................184
▫Troubleshooting Tips ...................185
▫General Information....................186
䡵POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........187
▫Opening Sunroof — Express ..............188
▫Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........188
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
▫Closing Sunroof — Express...............188
▫Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........188
▫Pinch Protect Feature ...................188
▫Venting Sunroof — Express ..............189
▫Sunshade Operation....................189
▫Wind Buffeting .......................189
▫Sunroof Maintenance ...................189
▫Ignition Off Operation ..................189
䡵ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...........190
䡵POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED.........193
䡵CUPHOLDERS.........................195
䡵STORAGE ............................195
▫Glove Compartment And Storage Bin .......195
▫Door Storage.........................197
䡵CONSOLE FEATURES ...................197
䡵CARGO AREA FEATURES ................199
▫Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging
Flashlight ...........................199
▫Cargo Cover ........................200
▫Removable Load Floor .................202
▫Cargo Tie-Down Loops .................202
▫Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped ........204
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............204
▫Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............204
▫Rear Window Defroster .................206
䡵ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .207
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set
in the day position (toward the windshield).
Inside Day/Night Mirror
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Outside Mirror — Driver Side
Adjust the flat outside mirror so you can just see the side
of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle with your head close to the door glass.
Outside Mirror — Passenger Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle with your head close to the center of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
Folding Outside Mirrors
The outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved,
manually, either forward or rearward to resist damage.
The hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full
rearward and normal.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror control is located on the driver’s door
trim panel.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move.
When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the
control to the center position to prevent accidentally
moving a mirror.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
Power Mirror Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
To use the vanity mirror, rotate the sun visor down and
swing the mirror cover upward.
Sun Visor Sliding Feature
The sun visors may be extended out to provide more
coverage of the side glass.
Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ“Work” or “Dial” ѧ“248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi-
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile,”
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
supported phones.
Vanity Mirror
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For Uconnect® customer support:
•U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-877-855-8400.
•Canadian Residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call,
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other without
wires or a docking station. Uconnect® Phone operates no
matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse,
pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and
has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The
Uconnect® Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be
linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is
available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
tention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Uconnect® Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
(Uconnect® Phone
button and Voice Com-
mand button) that will enable you to
access the system. When you push the button you will
hear the word Uconnect® followed by a BEEP. The
beep is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
prompt.
•For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
“Pair a Device,” the following compound command
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth Device.”
•For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice com-
mand “Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play some of the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for direc-
tions. Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of
the button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® web-
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone
pairing instructions:
1. Press the
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing.”
3. When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identifica-
tion Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter
into your mobile phone. You can enter any four-digit
PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the
initial pairing process.
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give
the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile phone.
Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a
unique phone name.
You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being the
highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones
to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any given time,
only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your
Uconnect® System. The priority allows the Uconnect®
Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
mobile
phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For
example, if priority three and priority five phones are
present in the vehicle, the Uconnect® Phone will use the
priority three mobile phone when you make a call. You can
select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time
(refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
Dial By Saying A Number
•Push the
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial.”
•The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•For example, you can say “234-567-8901.”
•The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
•Push the
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.”
•The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe,” where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect® Phonebook.”
•The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•Press the
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry.”
•When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob.”
•When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-
book entry, if desired.
•When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automati-
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
Uconnect® website for supported phones.
•To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
by Saying a Name” section.
•Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect® Phone.
•Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
•Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
•Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.
•This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion. Automatic down-
loaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.
•Press the
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit.”
•You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
•When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit”
feature.
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•Press the
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete.”
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the
button while the
Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired entry and
say “Delete.”
•After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
•Press the
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All.”
•The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
NOTE:
•Only the phonebook in the current language is deleted.
•Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
List All Names In The Uconnect® Phonebook
•Press the
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names.”
•The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•To call one of the names in the list, press the
but-
ton during the playing of the desired name, and say
“Call.”
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
•The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Press the
button to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” fol-
lowed by the phone number or phonebook entry you
wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call,
refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To
combine two calls, refer to “Conference Call” in this
section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the
button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two
calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on
hold at a time.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the
button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Cur-
rent Call is in Progress.” After the second call has
established, press and hold the button until you
hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button.
Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a
call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the
active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•Press the
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial.”
•The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect® Phone.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
1. After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
2. After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue
on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
3. An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
Uconnect® Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is
using:
•Press the
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and is usable across all languages.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•Press the
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
•If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and say
“Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
•The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the mobile phone directly.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect® Phone System in an emer-
gency, your mobile phone must be:
•turned on,
•paired to the Uconnect® System,
•and have network coverage.
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
•Press the
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Towing Assistance.”
NOTE:
You should program the desired Towing Assis-
tance phone number using the Voice Command system. To
do this, press the button and say “Setup,” followed by
“Towing Assistance.” When prompted say 1-800-521-2779
for U.S./Canada, say 55-14-3454 for Mexico City and
1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems.” Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
followed by the word “Send.” For example, if required
to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),
you can press the button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send.”
Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed
by “Send,” is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure,
and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
system will prompt you to enter the name or number
and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to
send. The Uconnect® Phone will then send the corre-
sponding phone number associated with the phone-
book entry, as tones over the phone.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
could press the
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•Press the
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE:
Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,
after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the
call did not go through even though the call is in progress.
Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone:
•Press the
button.
•Following the beep, say “Mute.”
To un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
•Press the
button.
•Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the
button
and say “Transfer Call.”
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
•Press the
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•When prompted, say “List Phones.”
•The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
being announced, press the
button and say
“Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections
for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired
phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
•Press the
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
•You can also press the
button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone
that you wish to select.
•The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft. [9 m]) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones
•Press the
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
prompts.
•You can also press the
button at any time while
the list is being played, and choose the phone you
wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect®
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode):
•Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
•Press the
button and say the “Voice Training,”
“System Training,” or “Start Voice Training” com-
mand.
You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be com-
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
•Press the
button.
•After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Voice Command
•For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the
overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
Performance is maximized under:
•Low-to-medium blower setting
•Low-to-medium vehicle speed
•Low road noise
•Smooth road surface
•Fully closed windows
•Dry weather condition
NOTE:
•Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
•Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
•Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
•You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
•Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•Audio quality is maximized under:
•Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
•Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
•Low Road Noise
•Smooth Road Surface
•Fully Closed Windows
•Dry Weather Conditions
•Operation From The Driver’s Seat
•Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect® Phone
•Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
•In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
load,” Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom-
ing and Missed Calls.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
If you wish to hear the new message:
1. Press the
button.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
3. Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
a new message:
1. Press the
button.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
3. You can either say the message you wish to send or
say “List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
To send a message, press the
button while the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction.
5. L O L.
6. Why?
7. I love you.
8. Call me.
9. Call me later.
10. Thanks.
11. See You in 15 minutes.
12. I am on my way.
13. I’ll be late.
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now.
18. When can we meet?
19. Send number to call.
20. Start without me.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Turn Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement ON/
OFF
Turning the Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement
OFF will stop the system from announcing the new
incoming messages.
•Press the
button.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, Incoming Message Announcement,” you will
then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate (s)
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate (s)
help
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate (s)
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
USB mass storage class device, iPod® family of
devices, Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device,
satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
tention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
When you press the Voice Command
button, you
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the Voice Command
button, listen
for the beep, and say your command.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The
system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can
add or change commands. This will become helpful
once you start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”
“Help” or “Main Menu.”
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com-
mand
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu.”
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands, Universal commands and Local commands.
Universal commands are available at all times. Local
commands are available if the supported radio mode is
active.
Changing The Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3.
Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to
the main menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•“Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
•“Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
•“Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
•“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•“USB” (to switch to USB mode)
•“Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®
Streaming mode)
•“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Disc Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
USB Mode
To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•“Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
Name, Track Name, etc.)
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
•“Play” (to play the current track)
•“Pause” (to pause the current track)
•“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memo Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
but-
ton to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
– “Save” (to save the memo)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
•“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
During the playback you may press the Voice Com-
mand
button to stop playing memos. You pro-
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
•“Change to setup”
•“Switch to system setup”
•“Main menu setup”
•“Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
•“Language English”
•“Language French”
•“Language Spanish”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
•“Tutorial”
•“Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect®
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Press the Voice Command
button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say
“Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to
the system and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be re-
peated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.
Power Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the center instrument panel area.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LOW-level after approximately
30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change.
When the LOW-level heating is selected, the system
automatically turns the heater and the indicator light
OFF after approximately 30 minutes of continuous op-
eration.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
•Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Manual Front Seat Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull
upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Seat Height Adjustment Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Manual Lumbar — If Equipped
The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard
side of the driver’s seatback. Rotate the lever downward
to increase the lumbar support or rotate the lever upward
to decrease the lumbar support.
Driver’s Seatback Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired angle
and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever,
lean forward and release the lever.
Lumbar Adjustment Lever Recline Lever
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
To fold the front passenger seat, lift the recliner handle to
the full upward position and push the seatback forward
until it rests on the seat cushion.
Fold-Flat Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
Fold-Flat Seat
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Push Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted Position)
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
•In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-
straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-
tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re-
straint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Rear Head Restraints
The head restraints in the rear are non adjustable. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle” for information on Tether routing.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull the strap forward to fold the rear
seatback flat.
To raise the seatback, pull the strap forward and lift the
seatback into its upright position.
Rear Seat Release Strap
Folded Rear Seat
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped
For additional comfort, pull the strap forward just
enough to release the seatback latch. Then push the
seatback to a reclined position, approximately 35 degrees
maximum, and release the strap.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick
panel.
2. Move the safety catch located under the front edge of
the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
Lift the hood prop rod, clipped to the right side (left side
facing hood) of the engine compartment, to secure the
hood in the open position. Place the hood prop at the
location stamped into the inner hood surface.
Hood Release Lever
Hood Safety Latch Location
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open 8 in (20 cm)
approximately and then drop it. This should secure
both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Prop Rod Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam
selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights,
the passing lights, and the fog lights. The multifunction
lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights And Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
to turn on the parking lights. Turn the end of the lever to
the second detent to turn on the headlights.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running
Lights (lower intensity), whenever the ignition is ON, the
engine is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking
brake is off, the turn signal is off, and the shift lever is in
any position except PARK.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the
ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the multifunc-
tion lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam head-
lights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever.
Headlight Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the head-
lights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Front Fog Light Operation
Turn Signal Operation
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to-
pass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams
will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next
flash-to-pass operation.
Instrument Panel Dimming
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the
rear view mirror. Each light is turned on by pressing the
button. Press the button a second time to turn the light off.
The lights also come on when a door is opened or the
dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second
detent.
Dimmer Control
Map/Reading Lights
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off
automatically.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
located on the right side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located on the end of the lever. For information
on the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Fea-
tures” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
CAUTION!
•Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
•In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
•Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper opera-
tion. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third
detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
tween cycles, desirable. Select the delay interval by
turning the end of the lever. Rotate the end of the lever
upward (clockwise) to decrease the delay time and
downward (counterclockwise) to increase the delay time.
The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approxi-
mately 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every
second.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low-speed
while the lever is pulled and for two wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the intermittent inter-
val previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Mist Feature
Push down on the control lever to activate a single wipe
to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a
passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt steering column lever is
located on the left side of the steering column, below the
turn signal lever.
Mist Operation
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column.
With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the
steering column up or down, as desired. Push the lever
up to lock the steering column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Tilt Steering Column Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET -
2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 2 km/h.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 2 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
•Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
•If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
•If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
•To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
•If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
•To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3.
Without releasing the button
proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink®
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any
time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
•Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
•Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
WARNING! (Continued)
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
•The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
•The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead
console.
WARNING!
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key
Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location acces-
sible to children. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are properly secured.
•Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet located
in the Integrated Center Stack (ICS) for added conve-
nience. This power outlet can power mobile phones,
electronics and other low power devices.
Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON
or ACC position. Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug
into the outlet for use. To preserve the heating element,
do not hold the lighter in the heating position.
12 Volt Power Outlet
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® knob and
element must be used.
CAUTION!
•Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
•Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Power Outlet Fuse Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•Do not touch with wet hands.
•Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
•If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
•Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with great caution.
•After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watt) AC power inverter is located on the
front of the center console for added convenience. This
outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and
XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most power
tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually, unplug the device and plug it in again. To
avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on
electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
•Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
(Continued)
115 Volt Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not touch with wet hands.
•Close the lid when not in use.
•If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent engine starting.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with great caution.
•After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders. There are
two illuminated cupholders located in the front.
There are two cupholders located in the back for the rear
passengers.
STORAGE
Glove Compartment And Storage Bin
Located on the passenger side of the instrument panel are
an upper storage bin and a lower glove compartment.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
To open the lower glove compartment, pull outward on
the release handle.
Storage Bins
1 — Upper Storage Bin
2 — Lower Glove Compartment Glove Compartment
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
The interior door panels are equipped with lower storage
areas.
CONSOLE FEATURES
The floor console contains both an upper and lower
storage compartment.
Front Door Storage
Rear Door Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
To open the upper storage compartment, push inward on
the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the lid
open.
To open the lower storage compartment, lift upward on
the lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compart-
ment and lift the lid open.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Upper Storage Compartment
Lower Storage Compartment
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging
Flashlight
The dual-function light is mounted in the headliner
above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area, and
part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight
when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED
light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium
batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for
convenience.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
Flashlight Location/Press To Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Cargo Cover
The cargo area trim panels include two notches for
mounting the available tonneau cover that accommo-
dates the reclining rear seat.
To install the Cargo Cover, insert either end of the cover
into one of the two notches located in the rear trim
panels. With one of the cover ends installed, push inward
on the opposite end and install it into the same notch
location of the rear trim panel.
Three Press Switch
Rear Trim Notches
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using the handle, pull the cover toward you and guide
the rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides
of the rear trim panel.
WARNING!
In a collision a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.
Cargo Cover Guides
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Removable Load Floor
The cargo area load floor is removable and can be
washed with mild soap and water.
Cargo Tie-Down Loops
There are four tie-downs (D-rings) installed in the cargo
area for securing cargo.
Removable Load Floor Cargo Area Tie-Downs
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•Cargo tie-down loops are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision
a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
•The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in
personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading
your vehicle:
•Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-
sible.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
•Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
•To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped
When the liftgate is open, the speakers can swing down
off the trim panel to face rearward, for tailgating and
other activities.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch
located on the center portion of the control lever. The
control lever is located on the right side of the steering
column.
Fold Down Speakers
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent position for rear wiper operation.
NOTE: The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode
only.
Rotate the center portion of the lever past the
first detent to activate the rear washer. The
washer pump and the wiper will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held (for a
maximum of 10 seconds). Upon release, the wiper will
continue to cycle two times before returning to the set
position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position if power accessory delay is active. Power acces-
sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this
happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to “park”.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate controls mode control knob. Push the
button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the
button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five
minutes of operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
cargo on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load
must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
dealer can order and install MOPAR® crossbars built
specifically for this roof rack system.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the luggage rack
crossbars. The luggage rack does not increase the total
load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total
load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external
rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
The crossbars must also be secured in one of the seven
detent positions marked with an arrow on the siderails to
prevent movement. To move the crossbars, loosen the thumb
screws located at the upper edge of each crossbar approxi-
mately eight turns, then move the crossbar to the desired
position, keeping the crossbars perpendicular to the luggage
rack side rails. Once the crossbar is in one of the seven detent
positions, retighten the thumb screws to lock the crossbar
into position.
NOTE:
•To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
in use, place the front crossbar in the first detent from
the front of the vehicle and the rear crossbar in the
second detent from the rear of the vehicle.
•If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For
improved satellite radio reception, place the rear cross-
bar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle
when not in use.
•The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if
equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
CAUTION!
•To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the luggage rack without
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection between
the load and the roof surface.
•To avoid damage to the luggage rack and vehicle,
do not exceed the maximum luggage rack load
capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy
loads as evenly as possible and secure the load
appropriately.
•Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........212
䡵INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................213
䡵INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....214
䡵MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED .....228
▫Control Buttons .......................229
䡵ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED ...........230
▫Engine Oil Change Indicator System —
If Equipped .........................234
▫EVIC Functions .......................235
▫Compass/Temperature/Audio ............235
▫Average Fuel Economy..................235
▫Distance To Empty (DTE) ................236
▫Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)..............236
▫Elapsed Time ........................236
▫Display Units Of Measure In .............237
▫Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) ...........................237
䡵Uconnect® 230 – AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND
6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK) ..............................243
4
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode.......243
▫Operation Instructions — DISC Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD – Video . . .252
▫Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files.........254
▫LIST Button — DISC Mode For
MP3/WMA Play ......................257
▫INFO Button — DISC Mode For
MP3/WMA Play ......................257
▫Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .259
䡵Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — IF EQUIPPED ...................263
▫Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped .................263
▫Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped..........................263
䡵Uconnect® 130 ........................264
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ......264
▫Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
CD And MP3 Audio Play ...............267
▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............269
▫Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .272
䡵Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO .....273
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ......273
▫Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
CD And MP3 Audio Play ...............279
▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............281
▫LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play......284
▫INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play .....285
▫Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .286
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................290
▫Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
Device .............................291
▫Using This Feature.....................291
▫Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons ...................292
▫Play Mode ..........................292
▫List Or Browse Mode...................294
▫Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) .......296
䡵STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......297
▫Radio Operation ......................298
▫CD Player ...........................298
䡵CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...........299
䡵RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .299
䡵CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................300
▫Manual Heating And Air Conditioning ......300
▫Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped .........................304
▫Operating Tips .......................310
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 5 — Storage Bin 9 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped
2 — Demisters 6 — Glove Compartment 10 — Hazard Warning Flasher
3 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Climate Controls 11 — ESC OFF Switch – If Equipped
4 — Radio 8 — Power Outlet 12 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position, the pointer will show the level of fuel
remaining in the fuel tank. The fuel pump
symbol points to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
2. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
3. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key
when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever
is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If
the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle
will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer
for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when
the engine is running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough
idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to
ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light
does not come on during starting, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
5. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
6. Speedometer
The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
7. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
8. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated. If
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)
with either turn signal on, a continuous chime
will sound to alert you to turn the signals off.
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
9. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for-
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
10. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light — If Equipped
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver or front
passenger’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
13. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is
allowed to cool or the four minutes duration is expired,
whichever come first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If
Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
14. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
15. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop them
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
16. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 16 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed. The light will also
turn on for about three seconds when the ignition is first
turned to ON/ RUN.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
17. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
rized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
18. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed
Control System is ON.
19. 4WD Indicator Light
This light indicates the vehicle is in 4WD Locked mode.
20. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
21. Odometer/Trip Odometer Display Reset Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles (0 km). The odometer must be in Trip mode to
reset.
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument
cluster, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center —
If Equipped” for further information.
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
23. Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display
This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans-
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
door .............................Door Ajar
gATE .............................Gate Ajar
gASCAP ......................Fuel Cap Fault
LoW tirE ....................LowTirePressure
CHANgE OIL ..............OilChange Required
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the in-
strument cluster, warnings such as “Door Ajar”, and
“Gate Ajar” will be displayed in the EVIC display. For
additional information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center — If Equipped”.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
LoW tirE
When tire pressure is low, the odometer display will
toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles.
CHANgE OIL Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer display for approxi-
mately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to
indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless
reset, this message will continue to display each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn
off the message temporarily, press and release the Trip
Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset the
oil change indicator system (after performing the sched-
uled maintenance), refer to the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. Do
not start the engine.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
24. OFF ROAD Indicator — If Equipped
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the 4WD lock
switch is activated and the shift lever is in LOW or
REVERSE position.
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II that
monitors emissions, engine, and automatic trans-
mission control systems. The light will illuminate when
the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the light does not come on when turning the key from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations,
the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
26. Hill Descent Indicator — If Equipped
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the
4WD Lock switch is activated and the trans-
mission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE
position (Off-Road Mode).
27. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
28. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol system (ESC) has been turned off by the
driver.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
29. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
to ON/RUN.
•Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
•The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
30. 4WD! Warning Light
This light monitors the 4-Wheel Drive (4WD)
system. The light will come on, for a bulb
check, when the ignition key is turned to the
ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long
as three seconds.
When lit solid: There is an 4WD system fault. 4WD
performance will be at a reduced level . Service the 4WD
system soon.
When blinking: The 4WD system is temporarily dis-
abled due to overload condition.
31. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display — If Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages.
For further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)”.
MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED
The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster and features a driver-interactive trip information
and temperature display.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Buttons STEP Button
Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to
scroll through sub menus (i.e., Temperature, Trip Func-
tions: Odometer, Trip A, Trip B).
RESET Button
To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position, then press and hold the RESET button
located on the steering wheel.
The following displays can be reset or changed:
•Trip A
•Trip B
Mini-Trip Control Buttons
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the STEP button on the instru-
ment cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The EVIC consists of the following:
•System Status
•Units
•Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
•Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
•Compass Heading
•Outside Temperature Display
•Trip Computer Functions
•Uconnect® Phone Displays (if equipped)
•Audio Mode Display
•Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
MENU Button
Press and release the MENU button to scroll
through the main menus (Fuel Economy, Warn-
ings, Timer, Units, System, Personal Settings)
or to exit sub-menus.
COMPASS Button
Press and release the COMPASS button to
display one of eight compass readings and the
outside temperature or to exit sub-menus.
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus, sub-menus or to select a per-
sonal setting in the setup menu.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the sub-menus.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
•Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime
after 1 mile (1.6 km) of distance travelled)
•Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
•Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
•Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
•Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
•RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Personal Settings Not Avail. — Vehicle not in PARK
(automatic transmission) or vehicle is in motion
(manual transmission).
•Door Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which door is
open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
motion).
•Doors Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which doors
are open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
motion).
•Gate (with vehicle graphic showing the Liftgate open
and A single chime)
•Headlamps or Park Lamps On
•Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
•Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
•Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
•Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
•Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
•Key In Ignition
•Low Tire
•Low Tire Pressure Display for Premium TPM System
•Service TPM System
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
Engine Oil Change Indicator System — If
Equipped
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five
seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol-
lowing procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not
start the engine.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Functions
•Compass/Temperature/Audio
•Average Fuel Economy
•Distance To Empty (DTE)
•Units In
•Elapsed Time
•Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
•Personal Settings
To Reset The Display
Pressing and holding the SELECT button once will clear
the function currently being displayed. Reset will only
occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed.
To reset all resettable functions, press and release the
SELECT button a second time within three seconds of
resetting the currently displayed function. Reset ALL will
be displayed during this three-second window.
Compass/Temperature/Audio
Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of
eight compass headings to indicate the direction the
vehicle is facing, the outside temperature, and the current
radio station.
For additional information regarding the compass, refer
to Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features).
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel reading before the reset.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. This is not resettable.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL⬙. This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙text and a new DTE value will be dis-
played, based on the current values in the DTE calcula-
tion and the current fuel tank level.
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Refer to “Starting And Operating”, “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System (TPMS)” for system operation.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
in the RUN/START position.
Elapsed time is displayed as follows:
hours:minutes:seconds
Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the
SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon
reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start
incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or
START.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Units Of Measure In
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
vehicle is stopped (manual transmission).
Press and release the MENU or DOWN buttons until
“Personal Settings” is displayed in the EVIC then press
the SELECT button.
Use the SELECT button to display one of the following
choices:
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects
English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, Francais or NL de-
pending on availability. As you continue, the displayed
information will be shown in the selected language.
NOTE: Uconnect® language will not change using the
EVIC. Please refer to “Language Selection” in Uconnect®
phone — If Equipped for details.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Auto Lock Doors
When ON is selected, all doors lock automatically when
the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
and hold the SELECT button when in this display until
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
Auto Unlock On Exit
When ON is selected, all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
when the driver’s door is opened, if the vehicle is
stopped (manual transmission) or the vehicle is stopped
and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position (automatic transmission). Press and hold the
SELECT button when in this display until “ON” or
“OFF” appears to make your selection.
RKE Unlock
When Driver’s Door 1st is selected only the driver’s door
will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button and require a second
press to unlock the remaining locked doors. When Re-
mote Unlock All Doors is selected, all of the doors will
unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK
button. Press and hold the SELECT button when in this
display until “Driver’s Door 1st” or “All Doors” appears
to make your selection.
Flash Lamps With Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn with lock feature selected. Press
and hold the SELECT button when in this display until
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sound Horn With Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
Lock feature. Press and hold the SELECT button when in
this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your
selection.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the SELECT
button when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears
to make your selection.
Key Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone, power sunroof, and
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Opening
either front vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press
and hold the SELECT button when in this display until
“OFF”, “45 sec.”, “5 min.”, or “10 min.” appears to make
your selection.
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked using the RKE transmitter. Press and hold the
SELECT button when in this display until “OFF”, “30
sec.”, “60 sec.”, or “90 sec.” appears to make your
selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating informa-
tion. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
Display Units In
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect® gps system units
can be changed between English and Metric.
Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display
until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears to make your
selection.
Confirmation Of Voice Commands — If Equipped
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
Uconnect® system are confirmed. Press and hold the
SELECT button when in this display until “ON” or
“OFF” appears to make your selection.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in
the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
NOTE:
A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as build-
ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order
to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
2. Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu displays in
the EVIC.
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will display in the
EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differ-
ences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the top of the right rear quarter window. This is where
the compass sensor is located.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi-
mately two seconds.
3. Press the DOWN button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays
in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.
Compass Variance Map
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 230 – AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND
6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turn-
ing the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases
the volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect® 230
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Phone Button Uconnect® Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con-
trol knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and
selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in this
display follow the above procedure, starting at step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or
undefined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R & B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
•DVD Enter — When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
•DISC Play/Pause —
You can toggle between playing the DVD and
pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT
button (if equipped).
•DVD Play Options — Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
•Subtitle — Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are avail-
able on the disc (if equipped).
•Audio Stream — Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
•Angle — Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
•The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
•These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
•Power — Allows you to turn the power ON and OFF
(if equipped).
•Lock — Locks out rear remote controls (if equipped).
•CH1/CH2 — Allows the user to change the mode of
either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing
the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
•Set Home Clock — Pressing the SELECT button
allows you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to adjust the hours and then press and
turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the
minutes. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again
to save changes.
•Player Defaults — Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — DISC Mode For CD And
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD – Video
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match for
the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does
not match the region code for the radio DVD player, it
will not play the disc. Customers may take their vehicle
to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the
player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM Or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•Maximum number of directory levels: 8
•Maximum number of files: 255
•Maximum number of folders: 100
•Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
WMA
Specification
Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48 48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback Of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
•Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIST Button — DISC Mode For MP3/WMA Play
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button — DISC Mode For MP3/WMA Play
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙display.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, an ipod®, or a microphone and
utilize the vehicles audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
Dolby®
Manufactured under license from Dolby® Laboratories.
Dolby® and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby® Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DTS™
“DTS™ and “DTS™ 2.0” are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.siriusxm.com, or at
www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Uconnect® (Satellite)
Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
Refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual for de-
tailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turn-
ing the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases
the volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect® 130
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con-
trol knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
•This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button operates in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•Maximum number of files: 255
•Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis-
play.)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
in longer disc loading times.
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Playback Of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turn-
ing the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases
the volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
Uconnect® 130
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle”.
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Phone Button Uconnect® Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con-
trol knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or
undefined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL con-
trol knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
•This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded.
•Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•Maximum number of files: 255
•Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis-
play.)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
in longer disc loading times.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Playback Of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙display.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Operating Instructions — Uconnect® (Satellite)
Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console
or glove compartment.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
•If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect® Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod® or external USB device support capability.
•Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod® /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console or glove compart-
ment.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to
connect to the USB port:
•The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
USB/AUX Connector Port
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
•The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
•The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device).
Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and
access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX”
button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and
say ⬙USB⬙or ⬙Switch to USB.⬙Once in the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external
USB device and display data:
•Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
•Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the VR
button and say ⬙Next Track.⬙
•Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track.⬙
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
track.
•Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF>> button.
•A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five sec-
onds.
•Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track.⬙
•While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
•Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙or ⬙Repeat
Off.⬙
•Press the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 de-
vice scan mode, which will play the first ten seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous
and next tracks.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
•RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙or
⬙Shuffle Off.⬙If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
•TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
•Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
played is highlighted on the radio display, press the
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay
in updating the information on the radio display may
be noticeable.
•During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of
the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclock-
wise) to get to the track faster.
•In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or exter-
nal USB device:
•Preset 1 – Playlists
•Preset 2 – Artists
•Preset 3 – Albums
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Preset 4 – Genres
•Preset 5 – Audiobooks
•Preset 6 – Podcasts
•Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list
on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
•To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
•LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod® or external USB device.
•Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item
to be selected and press the TUNE control knob. This
will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
•MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
CAUTION!
•Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in ex-
treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam-
age the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
•Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect® phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To enter BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on the
radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Stream-
ing Audio.”
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect®
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
Selecting A Different Audio Device
1. Press the PHONE button to begin.
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and following the beep, say
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next music
track on your cellular phone.
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the
previous music track on your cellular phone.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth® Streaming
Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
playing will display info.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the
player.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat-
ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ven-
tilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are seven blower
speeds.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Manual Temperature Control
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left into
the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures, while rotating
right into the red area indicates warmer
temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt
or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from sev-
eral patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the con-
trol, or a blend of two of these modes.
The closer the setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
•Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
•Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
•Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demist outlets.
•Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
•Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE:
•The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehu-
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
•For information on operating the Rear Defrost, refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle”.
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
put the system in recirculation mode. This can
be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are pres-
ent. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
control button to illuminate.
NOTE:
•Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
•The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
control is set to panel or panel / floor.
•The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
•When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to engage the Air Con-
ditioning. A light will illuminate when
the Air Conditioning system is engaged.
Rotating the dial left into the blue area of
the scale indicates cooler temperatures,
while rotating right into the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
•MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
•ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
select Panel, Bi-Level or Floor mode and move the
temperature control to the desired temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The Automatic Temperature Control system automati-
cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
Automatic Temperature Control
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Operation
Operation of the system is quite simple.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (right knob) and the
Blower Control knob (left knob) to AUTO.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
2. Dial in the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by ro-
tating the Temperature Control
knob (center knob). Once the com-
fort level is selected, the system will
maintain that level automatically
using the heating system. Should
the desired comfort level require air
conditioning, the system will auto-
matically make the adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the
average person is 72°F (22°C); however, this may vary.
NOTE:
•The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
without affecting automatic operation.
•Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
air conditioning is not necessary.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
•If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
Blower Control
For full automatic operation or for
automatic blower operation, turn the
blower knob to the AUTO position. In
manual mode there are seven blower
speeds that can be individual selected.
In off position the blower will shut off.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-
ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
•Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
•Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
•Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demist outlets.
•Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
•Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn on the air
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
flow through the outlets selected with
the Mode control dial. Press this but-
ton a second time to turn OFF the air
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
manual compressor operation is selected.
•Recirculation Control
The system will automatically control recircu-
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
Control button will put the system in recircu-
lation mode. This can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in
the control button to illuminate.
NOTE:
•When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
•In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the defrost mode in order to
improve window clearing. Recirculation will be dis-
abled automatically if these modes are selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
•Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in defrost mode.
Attempting to use the recirculation while in these
modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
•Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Bi-Level, Mix, or Floor
and then press the Recirculation button. This feature
reduces the possibility of window fogging.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-
senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service inter-
vals.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵STARTING PROCEDURES ................320
▫Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......320
▫Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....321
▫Normal Starting.......................321
▫Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) ................322
▫If Engine Fails To Start .................322
▫After Starting ........................322
䡵ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .323
䡵MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .323
▫Five-Speed Manual Transmission...........323
▫Recommended Shift Speeds ..............325
▫Downshifting ........................326
䡵AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED .........................326
▫Key Ignition Park Interlock...............328
▫Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .328
▫Six-Speed Automatic Transmission —
If Equipped .........................329
▫Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission
(CVT) — If Equipped...................336
5
䡵AUTOSTICK® (SIX-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION) — IF EQUIPPED ..........341
▫Operation ...........................341
▫AutoStick® (CVT) — If Equipped .........343
▫Operation ...........................343
䡵FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................345
䡵ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ................345
䡵OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ...............346
▫When To Use Low (L Off-Road) With The 4WD
Lock Lever Engaged ...................347
▫Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand ..........347
▫Hill Climbing ........................349
▫Driving Through Water .................352
▫After Driving Off-Road .................354
䡵POWER STEERING .....................355
▫Power Steering Fluid Check ..............356
䡵PARKING BRAKE ......................357
䡵BRAKE SYSTEM .......................359
▫Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............360
䡵ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .363
▫Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............363
▫Traction Control System (TCS) ............364
▫Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............364
▫Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........365
▫Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . .366
▫Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................367
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........369
▫ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light ................373
䡵TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............374
▫Tire Markings ........................374
▫Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........378
▫Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........379
▫Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........381
䡵TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........385
▫Tire Pressure ........................385
▫Tire Inflation Pressures .................387
▫Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .388
▫Radial Ply Tires ......................389
▫All Season Tires — If Equipped............389
▫Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped..........................390
▫Snow Tires ..........................390
▫Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped ...............391
▫Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped ........391
▫Full Size Spare — If Equipped ............392
▫Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped .........392
▫Tire Spinning ........................393
▫Tread Wear Indicators ..................394
▫Life Of Tire .........................394
▫Replacement Tires .....................395
䡵TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......397
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
䡵TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....397
䡵TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) .......................398
▫Base System .........................401
▫Premium System — If Equipped ...........404
▫General Information ...................408
䡵FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................408
▫2.0L And 2.4L Engine ...................408
▫Reformulated Gasoline .................409
▫Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............409
▫E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......410
▫MMT In Gasoline......................411
▫Materials Added To Fuel ................411
▫Fuel System Cautions...................412
▫Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............413
䡵ADDING FUEL ........................413
▫Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............413
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............415
䡵VEHICLE LOADING ....................416
▫Vehicle Certification Label ...............416
䡵TRAILER TOWING .....................418
▫Common Towing Definitions .............418
▫Trailer Hitch Classification ...............421
▫Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ......................422
▫Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............423
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫Towing Requirements ..................424
▫Towing Tips .........................429
䡵RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................431
▫Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .431
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
•Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re-
move the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the shift
lever in NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
•The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
•
If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is locked,
rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on
the locking mechanism and then turn the key.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Depress the
brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Tip Start
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch to
the START position and release it as soon as the starter
engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it
will disengage automatically when the engine is running.
If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position
and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to
start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
WARNING! (Continued)
another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if
done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully.
Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emer-
gencies” for further information.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” and “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine
for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key
in the ON position, release the accelerator pedal and
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Five-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transmission is in first gear, (not third), when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in a gear higher than first gear.
CAUTION!
•Launching in any gear except 1st gear will result in
excessive slipping of the clutch and potentially
lugging or stalling the engine.
•Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a
gear. Be sure the transmission is in first gear, (not
third), when starting from a standing position.
Damage to the clutch can result from starting in a
gear higher than first gear.
For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, fifth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear
on the clutch.
Shift Pattern
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE:
During cold weather, until the transmission lubri-
cant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transmission.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following
table.
Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds
Units in mph (km/h)
Engine Size Acceleration
Rate
1to2 2to3 3to4 4to5
All Engines Accel 14 (23) 23 (37) 29 (47) 45 (72)
Cruise 12 (19) 18 (29) 25 (40) 32 (52)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may
cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is
selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to
the clutch and the transmission can result from
skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting
at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal
is held pressed (i.e., not released).
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to second or first gear when descending a steep
grade.
When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur-
dened.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
•Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
•Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running.
•Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the
engine off, and remove the ignition key. Once the
key is removed, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. When leaving the vehicle, always re-
move the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
•Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
WARNING! (Continued)
•It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK
position. The key can only be removed from the ignition
when the ignition is in the LOCK position, and once
removed the transmission is locked in PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter-
lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the Autostick® shift control (refer to
“AutoStick®” in this section). Moving the shift lever to the
left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will manu-
ally select the transmission gear, and will display the
current gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
•Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
•Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the
brake pedal.
(Continued)
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine off, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the shift lever is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted move-
ment.
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
CAUTION!
•Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
•DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
•When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
•Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
•With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive
sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driv-
ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these condi-
tions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the
transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission
Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmis-
sion cools down.
During very cold temperatures (-4°F [-20°C] or below),
transmission operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmis-
sion temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con-
ditions are present:
•The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
•The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature.
•The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
ture.
•The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
•The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: Engagement of the torque converter clutch is
inhibited at very cold temperatures. Because the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting
into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. The torque
converter clutch will function normally once the trans-
mission is sufficiently warm.
Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission
(CVT) — If Equipped
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter-
lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
NOTE: The Continuously Variable Automatic Transmis-
sion (CVT) changes ratios in a continuous manner. This
may sometimes ⬙feel⬙as if it is slipping, but this is normal
and does not harm anything.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the Autostick® shift control (refer to
⬙AutoStick®⬙in this section). Moving the shift lever to the
left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will
manually select from a set of predefined transmission
gear ratios, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move
the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the
brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine off, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the shift lever is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•
Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
•When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
•Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
•With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the best fuel economy. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under
all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to ⬙AutoStick® (CVT)⬙in this section for
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
further information) to select a lower gear ratio. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear ratio will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up
long grades on hot days, the automatic transmission oil
may become too hot. If this happens, the transmission
overheat indicator light will come on, and the vehicle will
slow slightly until the transmission cools down enough
to allow a return to the requested speed. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the
high speed is maintained, the overheating may reoccur,
as before, in a cyclic fashion.
LOW (L)
Use this range for engine braking when descending very
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will down-
shift for maximum engine braking, and upshifts will
occur only to prevent engine overspeed.
AUTOSTICK® (SIX-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION) — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize en-
gine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down-
shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control during
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the six available gears. To engage AutoStick®, simply tap
the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the DRIVE
position. Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick® mode will
downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while
using (+) to enter AutoStick® mode will retain the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
current gear. When AutoStick® is active, the current
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right
(+) or left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed
condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear
until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
described below:
•The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
•The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
•The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
•You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
•If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
•Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is en-
gaged.
•Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
•The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold the shift lever to the
right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick®
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
AutoStick® (CVT) — If Equipped
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing six manually selectable gear ratios, giving you
more control of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to
maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts
and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle perfor-
mance. This system can also provide you with more
control during passing, city driving, cold slippery condi-
tions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other
situations.
Operation
NOTE: AutoStick® is not available until the CVT warms
up in cold weather.
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, AutoStick®
is activated by moving the shift lever side-to-side. Mov-
ing the shift lever to the right (+) will activate AutoStick®
and shift up to the next higher manual ratio, unless you
are already operating in or near Overdrive, in which case
sixth gear ratio will be selected. In like manner, moving
the shift lever to the left (-) will activate AutoStick® and
shift to the next lower manual ratio. The manually-
selected gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below:
•The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
•The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
•The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
•If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
•Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
•Heavy Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) application will
disengage AutoStick® mode.
•The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold the shift lever to the
right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick®
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides full time, on-demand, four–wheel
drive (4WD).
Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if addi-
tional traction is needed in sand, deep snow, or loose
traction surfaces, activate the “4WD LOCK” switch by
pulling up once and releasing. This locks the center
coupling allowing more torque to be sent to the rear
wheels. The “4WD Indicator Light” will come on in the
cluster. This can be done on the fly, at any vehicle speed.
To deactivate, simply pull on the switch one more time.
The “4WD Indicator Light” will then go out.
NOTE: Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in “Starting and Op-
erating” for further information.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
Four-Wheel Drive Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-
rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road.
You should be familiar with the terrain and area before
proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions:
hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and
ice. Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle’s
steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is
one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so always
keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good
driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns or brak-
ing. In most cases there are no road signs, posted speed
limits or signal lights. Therefore you will need to use your
own good judgment on what is safe and what is not. When
on a trail, you should always be looking ahead for surface
obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan your
future driving route while remembering what you are
currently driving over.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
off-road situation.
When To Use Low (L Off-Road) With The 4WD
Lock Lever Engaged
When driving off-road, shift into low (L Off-Road) and
activate the 4WD LOCK. This will provide additional
traction and activates the numerous off-road features to
improve handling and control on slippery or difficult
terrain. Due to the sustained lower gearing, low
(L Off-Road) with 4WD LOCK engaged will allow the
engine to operate in a higher power range. This will
allow you to cross over obstacles and descend hills, with
improved control and less effort.
NOTE: For maximum off-road performance, premium
fuel is recommended. While the vehicle will operate on
regular fuel when in L Off-Road mode, the engine has
been calibrated for maximum performance using pre-
mium fuel.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in
snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to
steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore, you
should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances
and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a
slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
vehicle’s momentum.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
Snow
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
slower speeds, activate the 4WD LOCK and shift the
transaxle to low (L Off-Road) if necessary. Do not shift to
a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Over-
revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will
be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your
steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and
forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the
tires to get a fresh ⬙bite⬙and help maintain your momen-
tum.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPM’s or vehicle speeds because engine brak-
ing may cause skidding and loss of control.
Mud
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires
and is very difficult to get through. You should use low
(L Off-Road) with the 4WD LOCK engaged and maintain
your momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try
turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn
quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud holes
pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting
stuck. They are normally full of debris from previous
vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before entering
any mud hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if
there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be
safely recovered if stuck.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Sand
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail
maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The
key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneu-
vers and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are
going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes,
reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi
(103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area. You
should use low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD LOCK
engaged and ESC turned off. Reduced tire pressure will
drastically improve your traction and handling, while
driving on the soft sand, but you must return the tires to
normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other
hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate the
tires prior to reducing the pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under-
standing of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep
to climb and should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You
should always climb hills straight up and down. Never
attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Before Climbing A Steep Hill
As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction
is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down?
What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If every-
thing looks good and you feel confident, then you should
use low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD LOCK engaged and
proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as
you climb the hill.
Driving Up Hill
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle
up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an
easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start
up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the
abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control. If
the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle
slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you
approach the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle and
slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as
you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator
and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no
more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth. This will
provide a fresh ⬙bite⬙into the surface and will usually
provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do
not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
back straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in
severe injury.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Down Hill
Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if
it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow
controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight
descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill
to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel
confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you
are in low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD LOCK engaged
and proceed with caution. Allow engine and hill descent
braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured or killed.
Driving Across An Incline
If at all possible avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle’s abilities. Driving across
an incline places more weight on the down-hill wheels,
which increases the possibilities of a down-hill slide or
rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with
firm and stable soils. If possible transverse the incline at
an angle heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover , which may result in severe injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift
to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing engine
and hill descent braking to control the descent and apply
your brakes if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in
severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a
hill in REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes. Never
drive diagonally across a hill, always drive straight
up or down.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided if possible, and only be
attempted when necessary in a safe responsible manner.
You should only drive through areas which are designated
and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage
to the environment. You should know your vehicles abili-
ties and be able to recover it if something goes wrong. You
should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep
water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake.
If the engine stalls, do not attempt to restart it. Determine
if it has ingested water first. The key to any crossing is low
and slow. You want to use low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD
LOCK engaged and proceed very slowly with a constant
slow speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h] maximum) and light
throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate
through the crossing. After crossing any water higher than
the bottom of the axle differentials, you should inspect all
of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the transaxle, transfer case,
engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too
fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or other
vehicle components and your brakes will be less
effective once wet and/or muddy.
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water
As you approach any type of water, you need to determine
if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get
out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick.
You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current
and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy
waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not
be intruding on any wildlife, and you can recover the
vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water
depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the
vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on
the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining the
depth and the ability to safely cross.
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas
normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water
types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it
difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach
angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water
holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to
entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier
vehicle recovery. If you are able to determine you can
safely cross, than proceed using the low and slow
method.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec-
tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
•Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
•Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
•Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
•Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
•After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
•If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
•Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
NOTE:
•When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
•This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
•Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-
mission in PARK, a manual transmission in RE-
VERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. How-
ever, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system oper-
ating.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-
bility, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the “Brake Warning
Light” will light.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light” on
is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking per-
formance or vehicle stability during braking may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or
will make your vehicle harder to control. You could
have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
•Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
•The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
(Continued)
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
•The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
The “ABS Warning Light” monitors the ABS
System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the “Brake Warning Light” is not on.
If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning
Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immedi-
ate repair to the ABS is required.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
working properly. This self-check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You may also experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock mode:
•The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
•The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
•Brake pedal pulsations.
•A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophis-
ticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible
to interference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment. This in-
terference can cause possible loss of Anti-Lock brak-
ing capability. Installation of such equipment should
be performed by qualified professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad-
vanced electronic brake control system that includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System
(TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitiga-
tion (ERM), Hill Descent Control (HDC), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All sys-
tems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions and are commonly
referred to as ESC.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
•Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
•The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
•The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
•The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
either the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. Refer to
“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section of this
manual.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions.
•The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
•The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It can not
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
NOTE: Anytime the ESC system is in the “Full Off”
mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation
of the available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
This system maintains vehicle speed while descending
hills during off-road driving situations. HDC will auto-
matically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to
between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 6 mph (9 km/h) depending
on terrain. The system is activated by placing the vehicle
in “Off-Road” mode and placing the shift lever in LOW
or REVERSE. Refer to “Safe Off-Road Driving” in “Start-
ing and Operating” for further information.
When HDC is properly enabled, the “Hill
Decent Control Light” in the instrument cluster
will be illuminated.
HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only
activate when the vehicle is descending a hill. It will not
activate on level ground. If desired, HDC can be fully
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
deactivated by putting the vehicle into ESC “Full Off”
mode. This is done by pressing and holding the “ESC
Off” button for five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section of the manual.
HDC operation can be overridden with brake application
to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed.
Conversely, if more speed is desired during HDC control,
the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed like
normal. When either the brake or the accelerator is
released, HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi-
nal set speed.
HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving. At
vehicle speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h) HDC will no
longer function. If the “HDC Indicator Light” begins to
flash this indicates that the brakes are getting too hot and
the vehicle should be stopped to allow the brakes to cool.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control-
ling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•Vehicle must be stopped.
•Vehicle must be on a 7% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
•Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
ing the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90
seconds.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Release the clutch pedal (if equipped).
6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower
switch bank below the climate controls) four times
within 20 seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off two
times.
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional half-turn to the right.
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was com-
pleted properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to it’s previous setting.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for over-steering or under-steering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the over-steering or under-steering condi-
tion. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in
the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the
driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the over-steer or under-steer condition
•Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
WARNING!
•The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
•ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent collisions.
•The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has three available operating modes for
four–wheel drive equipped vehicles and two available
operating modes for two–wheel drive equipped vehicles.
Full On (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or On (Two-Wheel
Drive Models)
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” or
“ESC Off” for specific reasons as noted below.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Partial Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or On
(Two-Wheel Drive Models)
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion
of ESC, except for the “limited slip” feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ⬙ESC OFF
Indicator Light⬙will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor-
mally allow is required to gain traction.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situa-
tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Par-
tial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced. Trailer Sway control
(TSC) (if equipped) is disabled when the ESC system
is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖmode.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu-
verability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by
pressing and holding the “ESC Off” switch for five
seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is
running. After five seconds, the ⬙ESC OFF Indicator
Light⬙will illuminate and the “ESC OFF” message will
appear in the odometer. Press and release the Trip
Odometer button located on the instrument cluster to
clear this message.
In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the “limited slip”
feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h). At
35 mph (56 km/h) the system returns to “Partial Off”
mode, as described above. TCS remains off. When the
vehicle speed drops below 30 mph (48 km/h) the ESC
system shuts off. ESC is deactivated at low vehicle speeds
so that it will not interfere with off-road driving however,
ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at
speeds above 35 mph (56 km/h). The ⬙ESC OFF Indicator
Light⬙will always be illuminated when ESC is off.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
switch. This will restore the “ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and an
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed
into the PARK position from any other position, and then
moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if
the message was previously cleared.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
With the ESC in the ⴖFull Offⴖmode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features are disabled.
In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system
will not engage to assist in maintaining stability.
“ESC Off” mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/
RUN position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
NOTE:
•The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position.
•Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was
cycled off previously.
•The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation
5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
•High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
TorS= Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R= Construction code
—⬙R⬙means radial construction
—⬙D⬙means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H= Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure—
Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period.
Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
Term Definition
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
•If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
•Safety
•Economy
•Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
•Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
•Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
WARNING! (Continued)
•Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
•Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat-
terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both underinflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
•Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
•Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
•Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
•The tire has not been driven on when flat.
•The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
•The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a au-
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall.
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
WARNING! (Continued)
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infor-
mation.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•Driving style
•Tire pressure
•Distance driven
•Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
WARNING!
•Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
•Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices
are not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on “cold
inflation tire pressure”. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
Tire Rotation
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
CAUTION!
•The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE:
•The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
•The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
•Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
•Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•Receiver Module.
•Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
•Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, a LOW TIRE message will
be displayed for a minimum of five seconds, and an
audible chime will be activated when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur,
you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish and the LOW
TIRE message will turn off once the updated tire pres-
sures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a
chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
and LOW TIRE message will still turn ON due to the
low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid.
4.
For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
Premium System — If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•Receiver Module
•Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel wells)
•Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
every ignition cycle for the first condition that it detects.
In addition, the EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE” text
message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic of
the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing.
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value. The system will automatically update, the
“LOW TIRE” text message will no longer be displayed,
the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop
flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will
extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this infor-
mation.
Service TPMS Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This text
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s) indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
text message will not be present, and a pressure value
will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can
occur with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed with a graphic display with
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙message is displayed.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire. The “LOW TIRE”
text message and the graphic with the low tire pres-
sure flashing will be displayed.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the
EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage for a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure values.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
values.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States MRXC4N3MF9
Canada 2546A-C4N3MF9
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.0L And 2.4L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•Operate in a lean mode.
•OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
•Poor engine performance.
•Poor cold start and cold drivability.
•Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
•Change the engine oil and oil filter.
•Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
•An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left side
of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
surface.
CAUTION!
•Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could
let impurities into the fuel system.
•A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
•To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
•Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
Fuel Filler Cap
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
•A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
•Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one
click. This is an indication that cap is properly tight-
ened.
•If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose or improperly installed, a “gASCAP”
message will be displayed in the Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Description” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap
properly and press the odometer/trip odometer RESET
button to turn the message off. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
The label contains the following information:
•Name of manufacturer
•Month and year of manufacture
•Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•Type of Vehicle
•Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension compo-
nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all
loose items securely before driving. Improper weight
distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your
vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes
operate.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙condition. The recommended way to
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as
part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
•
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Maximum GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Maximum Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
2.0L Auto/Man 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
2.4L Auto/Man 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
2.4L Auto/Man with
Trailer Tow Prep Package
(AHC)
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)
2.4L Auto With Freedom
Drive II Off Road
Package (AWL)
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•The tongue weight of the trailer.
•The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
•Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
•Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
•Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
•When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
•Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always block or ⴖchockⴖthe
trailer wheels.
•GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
WARNING! (Continued)
•Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
•Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
•Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
•Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
•When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
•Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
•An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
•Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydrau-
lic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you
need them and could have a collision.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of
you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting or changes in engine speed occur
while in this range, use the AutoStick® shift control (if
equipped) to select a lower gear ratio.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
NOTE: Using a lower gear ratio while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the trans-
mission fluid and filter as specified for ⬙police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing⬙. Refer to the ⬙Maintenance
Schedule⬙for the proper maintenance intervals.
AutoStick® — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose ⬙4⬙if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose ⬙3⬙or ⬙2⬙if
needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
•Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
•Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow None
•Transmission in
NEUTRAL
•Key in ACC Position
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK (FWD Only) OK (FWD Only)
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer All OK OK
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions
may be recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal
highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmis-
sion is in NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC
position.
CAUTION!
•DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
•DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a dolly is used when recreational towing.
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........435
䡵IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............435
䡵AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
OVERHEATING .......................436
䡵WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................437
▫Torque Specifications ..................437
䡵JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........438
▫Jack Location ........................439
▫Spare Tire Stowage ....................439
▫Preparations For Jacking ................440
▫Jacking Instructions ...................441
▫Road Tire Installation ...................447
䡵TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED .............449
▫TIREFIT Storage ......................449
▫TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation .....449
▫TIREFIT Usage Precautions...............450
▫Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT ..............453
6
䡵JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........458
▫Preparations For Jump-Start ..............459
▫Jump-Starting Procedure ................461
䡵FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............463
䡵SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE ................464
䡵TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........465
▫With Ignition Key .....................467
434 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
•On the highways — slow down.
•In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 435
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the
instrument cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn
off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the H (red) mark for more than a minute,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING
During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up
long grades on hot days, the automatic transmission oil
may become too hot.
If this happens, the transmission overheat in-
dicator light will come on, and the vehicle will
slow slightly until the automatic transmission
cools down enough to allow a return to the
requested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the
overheating may reoccur, as before, in a cyclic fashion.
436 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.25 19 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 437
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
Torque Patterns
438 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
•Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
•The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the cargo area.
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the cargo area.
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
Spare Tire And Jack Stowage 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 439
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission)
or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the
jacking position. For example, if
changing the right front tire, block
the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
440 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
•Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
•Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 441
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Jack Warning Label
Jacking Locations
442 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Refer to “Tires — General Information” in “Start-
ing And Operating” for further information about the
spare tire, it’s use, and operation.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the
left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench
from the jack assembly.
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Removing Jack Handle From Jack 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 443
NOTE:
There are front and rear jacking locations on each
side of the body. The front locations are outlined by two
triangular cutouts on one of the flanges in the sill flange
assembly. The rear location is the same but with two
rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped with plastic trim,
the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking locations
in the body.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
3.
Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
444 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
4. Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning
the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
covers, where applicable, off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 445
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel nuts. When reinstalling the original wheel, prop-
erly align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the
wheel cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.
6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
7. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
Specifications” in this section for the correct lug nut
torque. If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts
correctly, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or service station.
8. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Release the parking brake. Reassemble the lug
wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare
tire area. Secure the assembly using the means pro-
vided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
446 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop
could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
10. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
Correct the tire pressure as required.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand. Do
not use a hammer or excessive force to install the
cover.
3.
Install the five wheel lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 447
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
4. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
5. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this sec-
tion for correct lug nut torque.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2.
Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this sec-
tion for correct lug nut torque.
448 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
TIREFIT Storage
The TIREFIT kit is located under the load floor in the
cargo area.
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation
TIREFIT Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on bottom
side of TIREFIT Kit)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 449
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols
to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting
this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and
turn to this position to inject the TIRE-
FIT Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use
the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when
selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the
Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT
kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
•Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and
Hose Replacement”.
450 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
•The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
•When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
•For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
•You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose
(7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only in-
tended to seal punctures less than ¼” (6 mm) diameter
in the tread of your vehicle.
•Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
TIREFIT Expiration Date Location 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 451
WARNING!
•Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the TIREFIT kit.
•Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
source.
•A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
•Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIRE-
FIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respira-
tory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
(Continued)
452 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2.
Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach
the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3.
Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 453
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated
Tire:
•Always start the engine before turning ON the
TIREFIT kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
•After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the
Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position
and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn
On the TIREFIT kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the TIREFIT kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
454 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1.
Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
•The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 455
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
•The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
•Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma-
nent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
456 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 457
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the TIREFIT service kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4.
Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
458 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment below the air intake duct. To access
the battery remove the air intake duct by turning the two
finger screws, located on the radiator support.
Air Intake Finger Screws
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 459
WARNING!
•Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
•Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK (manual transmission to NEUTRAL) and
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Positive Battery Post
460 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Remove Air Intake before proceeding with this
Jump-Starting procedure.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 461
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
5. Reinstall the air intake duct.
462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear and
REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently press-
ing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator
pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion,
without spinning the wheels, or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙mode.
CAUTION!
•When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
•Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
shift lever override access cover (located on the right
side of the shifter housing).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN
position, but do not start the engine.
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
port, and push and hold the override release lever
forward.
7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
9. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the
Ground
Manual
Transmission
Automatic
Transmission
(FWD Only)
Automatic
Transmission 4WD
Flat Tow NONE
•Transmission in
NEUTRAL
•Key in ACC or
ON/RUN
position
If transmission is
operable:
•Transmission in
NEUTRAL
•25 mph
(40 km/h) max
speed
•15 miles (24 km)
max distance
If transmission is
operable:
•Transmission in
NEUTRAL
•25 mph
(40 km/h) max
speed
•15 miles (24 km)
max distance
Wheel Lift or Dolly
Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front FWD Models
ONLY
OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
466 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
With Ignition Key
Automatic Transmission
•Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles can be towed with
the front wheels elevated, or on a flatbed truck (all four
wheels OFF the ground).
•Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicles can be towed on a
flatbed truck (all four wheels OFF the ground).
If the transmission is operable, this vehicle may be flat
towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the
following conditions:
•The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
•The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
•The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) models may also be towed
(under the same limitations shown above) with the rear
wheels elevated.
CAUTION!
•Towing this vehicle using any other method could
result in extensive damage to the transfer case
and/or transmission.
•Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Shift Lever
Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the
automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 467
Manual Transmission
•Front Wheel Drive (FWD) or Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
vehicles can be flat towed (all four wheels on the
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
•FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels
elevated.
•FWD or 4WD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck
(all wheels OFF the ground).
CAUTION!
•DO NOT flat tow any disabled vehicle if condition
is related to the clutch, transmission or driveline.
Additional damage to the drivetrain could result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe engine, transmission,
or drivetrain damage. Damage from improper tow-
ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
All Transmissions
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans-
mission remains in NEUTRAL.
468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
•DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
•When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only ap-
proved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 469
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L ..........473
䡵ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ..........474
䡵ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .475
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............475
䡵EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................476
䡵REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................477
䡵DEALER SERVICE ......................478
䡵MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........478
▫Engine Oil ..........................479
▫Engine Oil Filter ......................482
▫Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................482
▫Maintenance-Free Battery ...............483
▫Air Conditioner Maintenance .............484
▫Body Lubrication .....................487
▫Windshield Wiper Blades ...............488
▫Adding Washer Fluid ..................488
▫Exhaust System ......................489
▫Cooling System ......................491
▫Brake System ........................497
7
▫Automatic Transmission (Six-Speed) —
If Equipped .........................500
▫Automatic Transmission (CVT) —
If Equipped .........................502
▫Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......504
▫Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) — AWD/4WD
Models Only ........................505
▫Power Transfer Unit (PTU) — AWD/4WD
Models Only ........................505
▫Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................506
䡵FUSES ..............................512
▫Integrated Power Module ...............513
䡵VEHICLE STORAGE ....................517
䡵REPLACEMENT BULBS .................517
䡵BULB REPLACEMENT ..................519
▫Headlamps .........................519
▫Fog Lamps ..........................519
▫Rear Tail, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps . . .520
▫License Lamps .......................520
▫Center High-Mounted Stoplamp ..........520
䡵FLUID CAPACITIES ....................521
䡵FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
GENUINE PARTS ......................522
▫Engine .............................522
▫Chassis ............................523
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a⬙clicking⬙sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
RESET button to turn off the message. If the problem
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
of a normal bulb check.
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
•The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
•The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will
consist of a crosshatch zone which depicts the MIN at the
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range. Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level
at the full end of the indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil®
or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem-
peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity
grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
(Continued)
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
•Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
•Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
WARNING! (Continued)
•The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
•It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
•Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re-
place the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine
compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
•Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489
CAUTION!
•The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
•Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
•When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
•You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS-12106).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
•Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
•Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
•This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
•Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen-
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
•Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
•Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera-
ture, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines
shown on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant
(antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
•If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
•Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual trans-
mission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both
the brake system and the clutch release system. The two
systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one
system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
•To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
•Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
•Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis-
sion.
Automatic Transmission (Six-Speed) — If
Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant (Six-Speed Transmission)
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
this section for fluid specifications. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using
the recommended fluid.
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality, and will require more
frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids,
Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for
fluid specifications.
500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic transmission fluid is an engineered product
and its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to
the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid
using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect
seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tion, visit you authorized dealer immediately to have the
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an im-
proper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle. However, if the vehicle is frequently
driven on rough or unpaved roads, on mountain roads,
on short trips, or in heavy city traffic during hot weather,
or is used for frequent trailer towing, police, fleet, taxi,
etc., change the fluid as indicated in the Maintenance
Schedule. In addition, change the fluid and filter if the
fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Automatic Transmission (CVT) — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant (CVT)
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid which has the special friction coefficient additives
necessary for proper steel belt traction on the drive and
driven pulleys. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. It is impor-
tant to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid.
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
•Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid will cause belt slip and
result in a complete transmission failure! Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications.
502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic transmission fluid is an engineered product
and its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to
the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid
using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect
seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
provided. Your authorized dealer can check your trans-
mission fluid level using special service tools. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
your authorized dealer immediately to have the trans-
mission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with
an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the ⬙Maintenance Schedule⬙for the proper
maintenance intervals. In addition, change the fluid and
filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) — AWD/4WD Models
Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing the
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between
the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below the fill
hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) — AWD/4WD Models
Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing the
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between
the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below the fill
hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•Stone and gravel impact.
•Insects, tree sap and tar.
•Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
•Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
•Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
Special Care
•If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507
•If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
•All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
•To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1.
Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
•
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
•Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
•If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
(Continued)
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Integrated Power Module
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label that
identifies each component may be printed on the inside
of the cover. Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Integrated Power Module 7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
1 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow – If Equipped
2 15 Amp Lt Blue AWD/4WD Control Module – If
Equipped
3 10 Amp Red Rear Center Brake Light Switch
4 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch/Occupant Classification
Module
5 15 Amp Lt Blue Battery Feed For Power Tech
6 10 Amp Red Power Mirror/Steering Control Satellite
Radio/Hands-Free Phone
7 30 Amp Green Ignition Off Draw
8 30 Amp Green Ignition Off Draw
9 40 Amp Green Power Seats
10 20 Amp Yellow Power Locks/Interior Lighting
11 15 Amp Lt Blue Power Outlet
12 20 Amp Yellow 115V AC Inverter – If Equipped
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
13 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
14 10 Amp Red Instrument Cluster
15 40 Amp Green Radiator Fan
16 15 Amp Lt Blue
Dome Lamp/Sunroof/Rear Wiper Motor
17 10 Amp Red Wireless Control Module
18 40 Amp Green Auto Shutdown Relay
19 20 Amp Yellow Radio Amplifiers
20 15 Amp Lt Blue Radio
21 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module/Siren – If Equipped
22 10 Amp Red Heating, AC/Compass
23 15 Amp Lt Blue Auto Shutdown Relay
24 15 Amp Lt Blue Power Sunroof – If Equipped
25 10 Amp Red Heated Mirror – If Equipped
26 15 Amp Lt Blue Auto Shutdown Relay
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
27 10 Amp Red Airbag Control Module
28 10 Amp Red Airbag Control Module/Occupant
Classification Module
29 Hot Car (No Fuse Required)
30 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seat – If Equipped
31 10 Amp Red Headlamp Washer – If Equipped
32 30 Amp Pink Auto Shutdown Relay
33 10 Amp Red J1962 Conn/Powertrain Control Module
34 30 Amp Pink Antilock BrakeValve
35 40 Amp Green Antilock Brake Pump
36 30 Amp Pink Headlamp/Washer Control/Smart
Glass – If Equipped
37 25 Amp Clear Diesel Fuel Heater – If Equipped
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•When installing the IPM cover, it is important to
ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into
the IPM, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
•When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
•Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
•Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Header Lamp T578
Center Dome Lamp T578
Rear Cargo Lamp/Flashlight 8–A35LF
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamp H13
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Lamp 3757KA
Front Fog Lamp PSX24W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED Assembly (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Turn/Stop Lamp 3157
Backup Lamp W16W (921)
License Lamp W5W
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Headlamps
1. Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the
headlamp.
2. Reach into engine compartment and pull red lock out
at connector.
3. Remove the green connector from the back of the bulb
by pulling straight back.
4. Twist the bulb to the left.
5. Pull bulb outward from assembly.
NOTE: These are halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch
the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers
could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb
life.
Fog Lamps
1. Access lamp through the lower fascia cutout.
2. Remove electrical connector from bulb.
3. Remove bulb from housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
Rear Tail, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the taillamp housing.
3. Grasp the taillamp and pull firmly to disengage the
light from the aperture panel.
4. Twist and remove socket from the light.
5. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
License Lamps
1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the
snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate.
2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull the bulb from the socket.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
This light is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer
for replacement.
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 13.6 Gallons 51.5 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.26 Liters
Cooling System *
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®,
Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection 87 Octane
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission (CVT) — If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR® CVTF+4®
Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission (Six-Speed) — If Equipped We recommend you use SK Energy ATF SP-4 Transmis-
sion Fluid.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear & Axle
Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear & Axle
Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703
should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid
+4, MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .............526 ▫Maintenance Chart.....................528
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Change
Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Clus-
ter Descriptions” or “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
526 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
•Check engine oil level
•Check windshield washer fluid level
•Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
•Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and fill as needed
•Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
•Change oil and filter.
•Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
•Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
•Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
•Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
•Inspect exhaust system.
•Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions. 8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 527
Maintenance Chart
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary. XXX X X X X
Inspect brake linings, replace if necessary. Check
park brake function, adjust if necessary. XXX X X X X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
528 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs** X X X X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
Replace rear drive assembly (RDA) fluid. X X
Replace power transfer unit (PTU) fluid. X X
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if
using your vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. (CVT only) X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 529
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
(CVT only) X
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter
(six-speed only) if you frequently drive: on rough or
unpaved roads, on mountain roads, on short trips,
in heavy city traffic during hot weather, or if you
use the vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
530 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing,
heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (com-
mercial service), off-road, desert operation or more
than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
XX X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 531
WARNING!
•You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
•Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
532 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................535
▫Prepare For The Appointment.............535
▫Prepare A List ........................535
▫Be Reasonable With Requests .............535
䡵IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............535
▫Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center.......536
▫Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ......537
▫In Mexico Contact:.....................537
▫Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ...........537
▫Service Contract ......................538
䡵WARRANTY INFORMATION .............539
䡵MOPAR®PARTS.......................539
䡵REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............539
▫In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................539
▫In Canada...........................540
䡵PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............540
9
䡵DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................541
▫Treadwear...........................542
▫Traction Grades .......................542
▫Temperature Grades....................542
534 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 535
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
•If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•Owner’s name and address
•Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•Authorized dealer name
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426–5337
536 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 537
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
(Continued)
538 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 539
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
540 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-
nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 541
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
542 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 543
INDEX
10
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ................360
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............494
Adding Fuel .............................413
Adding Washer Fluid ......................488
Additives, Fuel ...........................411
Airbag..................................61
Airbag Deployment ........................72
Airbag Light .............................68
Airbag Maintenance ........................73
Airbag, Side ..............................64
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ................65
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .482
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................484
Air Conditioning..........................300
Air Conditioning Controls ...................300
Air Conditioning Filter .....................312
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..............313
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .................484
Air Conditioning System ....................300
Air Pressure, Tires.........................387
Alarm Light .............................219
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................18
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............8
Antenna, Satellite Radio.....................260
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..................493
Capacities ............................521
Disposal ..............................496
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................360
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................216
Appearance Care .........................506
Assistance Towing.........................125
Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................107
Automatic Door Locks ......................32
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........304
Automatic Transaxle ........................12
Fluid Level Check .......................503
Overheating ...........................436
Automatic Transmission ....................326
546 INDEX
Fluid and Filter Changes ..................502
Fluid Level Check .......................501
Fluid Type ............................500
Gear Ranges ...........................329
Special Additives .......................501
Autostick ...............................341
Battery.................................483
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........25
Belts, Seat ...............................98
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................487
B-Pillar Location ..........................381
Brake Assist System .......................364
Brake Fluid .............................523
Brake, Parking ...........................357
Brakes .................................359
Brake System ............................359
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................360
Master Cylinder ........................498
Parking ..............................357
Warning Light .........................217
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................328
Bulb Replacement .........................517
Bulbs, Light .............................100
Calibration, Compass ......................241
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........521
Capacities, Fluid ..........................521
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................413
Oil (Engine) ...........................473
Power Steering .........................356
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................495
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...................97
Cargo Area Cover .........................200
Cargo Area Features .......................199
Cargo Compartment .......................199
Light ................................199
10
INDEX 547
Luggage Carrier ........................207
Cargo Light .............................199
Cargo Load Floor .........................202
Cargo Tie-Downs .........................202
Car Washes .............................506
Cellular Phone ...........................110
Center High Mounted Stop Light ..............520
Chains, Tire .............................397
Changing A Flat Tire .......................438
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................376
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .476
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............96
Checks, Safety ............................96
Child Restraint ............................76
Child Restraints
Child Seat Installation .....................92
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint .....89
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt ..............................91
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......83
Child Safety Locks .........................34
Clean Air Gasoline ........................409
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................508
Climate Control ..........................300
Clock..................................245
Clutch .................................498
Clutch Fluid .............................498
Coin Holder .............................197
Cold Weather Operation ....................322
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............299
Compact Spare Tire........................391
Compass ...............................228
Compass Calibration .......................241
Compass Variance.........................241
Connector
UCI.................................290
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........290
548 INDEX
Console ................................197
Contract, Service ..........................538
Coolant (Antifreeze) .......................521
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........495
Cooling System...........................491
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............494
Coolant Level ..........................492
Disposal of Used Coolant .................496
Drain, Flush, and Refill ...................492
Inspection ............................496
Points to Remember .....................496
Pressure Cap ..........................495
Radiator Cap ..........................495
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .............493
Corrosion Protection .......................506
Cruise Light .............................221
Cupholders .............................197
Customer Assistance .......................535
Data Recorder, Event .......................75
Dealer Service............................478
Defroster, Rear Window.....................206
Defroster, Windshield .......................98
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..................171
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................475
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................167
Dipsticks
Power Steering .........................356
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................496
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ......34
Door Locks ............................30
KeyFob...............................30
Remote ...............................30
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................30
Door Locks, Automatic ......................32
Door Opener, Garage.......................177
10
INDEX 549
Downshifting ............................326
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................154
Driving ................................345
Off-Pavement ..........................346
Off-Road .............................346
Electrical Power Outlets.....................190
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................108
Electronic Brake Control System ...............363
Anti-Lock Brake System ..................363
Brake Assist System .....................364
Electronic Roll Mitigation .................365
Traction Control System ...................364
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........173
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............369
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ......230
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking ...............................438
Jump Starting ..........................458
Towing ..............................465
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........476
Engine .................................473
Air Cleaner ...........................482
Block Heater ..........................323
Break-In Recommendations .................95
Checking Oil Level ......................479
Coolant (Antifreeze) .....................492
Cooling ..............................491
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................97
Fuel Requirements ......................408
Jump Starting ..........................458
Oil..................................479
Oil Filler Cap ..........................473
Oil Selection ...........................480
Oil Synthetic ..........................481
Overheating ...........................435
Temperature Gauge ......................220
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............71
550 INDEX
Ethanol ................................409
Event Data Recorder ........................75
Exhaust Gas Caution........................39
Exhaust System ...........................97
Exterior Lights ...........................100
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................482
Air Conditioning .......................312
Engine Oil ............................482
Engine Oil Disposal .....................482
Flashers ................................435
Hazard Warning ........................435
Turn Signal ...........................100
Flooded Engine Starting ....................322
Fluid, Brake .............................523
Fluid Capacities ..........................521
Fluid Leaks .............................100
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle .....................503
Automatic Transmission ..................501
Cooling System .........................492
Power Steering .........................356
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ...........522
Fog Lights ..............................165
Folding Rear Seat .........................160
Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) ...................160
Four Wheel Drive .........................345
Systems ..............................345
Four Wheel Drive Operation .................345
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................463
Fuel...................................408
Adding ..............................413
Additives .............................411
Capacity .............................521
Clean Air .............................409
Ethanol ..............................409
10
INDEX 551
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................413
Gasoline ..............................408
Gauge ...............................214
Light ................................215
Materials Added ........................411
Methanol .............................409
Octane Rating ..........................408
Requirements ..........................408
Tank Capacity ..........................521
Fueling ................................413
Fuel System Caution .......................414
Fuses ..................................512
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ............177
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...................413
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................409
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................408
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................409
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .....................220
Fuel .................................214
Odometer .............................223
Tachometer ............................217
Gear Ranges .............................329
Gear Select Lever Override ..................464
General Information .......................142
Glass Cleaning ...........................510
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...................419
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..................416
GVWR .................................416
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) ...............110
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................435
Headlights ..............................519
Cleaning .............................510
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........167
Passing ..............................167
552 INDEX
Replacing .............................519
Switch ...............................165
Head Restraints ..........................156
Heated Mirrors ...........................109
Heated Seats.............................151
Heater .................................300
Heater, Engine Block .......................323
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .167
Hill Descent Control .......................226
Hill Start Assist...........................367
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................421
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) ............177
Hood Release ............................162
Ignition .................................12
Key..................................12
Ignition Key Removal .......................12
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................15
Infant Restraint ...........................76
Information Center, Vehicle ..................230
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................106
Instrument Cluster ........................214
Instrument Panel and Controls ................212
Instrument Panel Cover .....................511
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............511
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ..............513
Interior Appearance Care....................509
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............171
Introduction ..............................4
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio ...............146
Jacking Instructions........................441
Jack Location ............................439
Jack Operation ...........................438
Jump Starting ............................458
10
INDEX 553
Key-In Reminder ..........................14
Keyless Entry System (Sedan) .................20
Key, Programming .........................17
Key, Replacement ..........................16
Keys ...................................12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................15
Knee Bolster..............................61
Lane Change and Turn Signals ................520
Lane Change Assist........................167
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................43
Latches ................................100
Hood ................................162
Lead Free Gasoline ........................408
Leaks, Fluid .............................100
Life of Tires .............................394
Liftgate (Sedan) ...........................38
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...............204
Light Bulbs..............................100
Lights .................................100
Airbag ................................68
Alarm ...............................219
Anti-Lock .............................216
Back-Up ..............................520
Brake Assist Warning ....................373
Brake Warning .........................217
Bulb Replacement .......................519
Cargo ...............................199
Center Mounted Stop ....................520
Daytime Running .......................165
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................164
Engine Temperature Warning ...............217
Exterior ..............................100
Fog .................................165
Headlights ............................165
Headlight Switch .......................165
High Beam ............................167
High Beam Indicator .....................216
554 INDEX
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............167
Instrument Cluster ......................165
License ..............................520
Lights On Reminder .....................165
Low Fuel .............................215
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........225
Map Reading ..........................168
Oil Pressure ...........................215
Seat Belt Reminder ......................216
Security Alarm ..........................19
Service ...............................519
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............221
Traction Control ........................373
Turn Signal ...........................100
Voltage ..............................214
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ......214
Loading Vehicle ..........................416
Capacities ............................417
Tires ................................381
Locks ..................................30
Automatic Door .........................32
Child Protection .........................34
Door .................................30
Power Door ............................31
Lubrication, Body .........................487
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) ...................207
Lug Nuts ...............................437
Lumbar Support ..........................154
Maintenance Free Battery....................483
Maintenance Procedures ....................478
Maintenance Schedule ......................526
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).......225
Manual, Service ..........................540
Manual Transaxle
Fluid Level Check .......................505
Lubricant Selection ......................505
Manual Transmission ......................323
10
INDEX 555
Fluid Level Check .......................504
Frequency of Fluid Change ................504
Lubricant Selection ......................504
Map/Reading Lights .......................168
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................498
Methanol ...............................409
Mini-Trip Computer .......................228
Mirrors ................................106
Automatic Dimming .....................107
Electric Powered ........................108
Exterior Folding ........................108
Heated ...............................109
Outside ..............................108
Rearview .............................106
Vanity ...............................110
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................398
Mopar Parts .............................477
MTBE/ETBE ............................409
Multi-Function Control Lever.................164
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................95
Occupant Restraints ........................67
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ..................39
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................408
Odometer...............................223
Trip.................................221
Oil Change Indicator .......................234
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..................234
Oil, Engine ..............................479
Capacity .............................521
Change Interval ........................480
Checking .............................479
Disposal ..............................482
Filter ................................482
Filter Disposal .........................482
Identification Logo ......................481
556 INDEX
Materials Added to ......................482
Recommendation .......................480
Synthetic .............................481
Viscosity .............................481
Oil Filter, Selection ........................482
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................475
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ............177
Operating Precautions ......................475
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............5
Overheating, Engine .......................220
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .............5
Paint Care ..............................506
Panic Alarm ..............................24
Parking Brake............................357
Passing Light ............................167
Personal Settings..........................237
Pets....................................95
Pets, Transporting..........................95
Phone, Cellular ...........................110
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®) ...............110
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..........381
Power
Door Locks ............................31
Mirrors ..............................108
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........190
Steering ..............................355
Sunroof ..............................187
Transfer Unit ..........................505
Windows ..............................35
Power Steering Fluid.......................523
Power Transfer Unit .......................505
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ................60
Preparation for Jacking .....................440
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................54
Programmable Electronic Features .............237
10
INDEX 557
Radial Ply Tires ..........................389
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........495
Radio Operation ..........................243
Radio (Sound Systems) .....................243
Rear Axle (Differential) .....................505
Rear Drive Assembly.......................505
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) .......................38
Rear Seat, Folding .........................160
Rearview Mirrors .........................106
Rear Window Defroster .....................206
Rear Window Features .....................204
Rear Wiper/Washer........................204
Recorder, Event Data .......................75
Recreational Towing .......................431
Reformulated Gasoline .....................409
Refrigerant ..............................485
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................59
Remote Control
Door Locks ............................20
Security Alarm ..........................18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
FCC General Information ..................26
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) .................20
Remote Starting System......................26
Replacement Bulbs ........................517
Replacement Keys .........................16
Replacement Parts.........................477
Replacement Tires .........................395
Reporting Safety Defects ....................539
Restraint, Head...........................156
Restraints, Child...........................76
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ................200
Roll Over Warning ..........................4
Roof Type Carrier .........................207
Rotation, Tires ...........................397
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................98
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................100
558 INDEX
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................539
Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................97
Safety Information, Tire .....................374
Safety Tips ...............................96
Satellite Radio Antenna .....................260
Schedule, Maintenance .....................526
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................511
Seat Belt Reminder .........................59
Seat Belts ................................98
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................48
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........48
And Pregnant Women .....................60
Child Restraint ..........................76
Extender ..............................60
Front Seat .............................43
Inspection .............................98
Pretensioners ...........................54
Rear Seat ..............................43
Untwisting Procedure .....................52
Seat Belts (Sedan) ..........................39
Seats ..................................148
Adjustment ...........................148
Heated ...............................151
Lumbar Support ........................154
Rear Folding ..........................160
Rear Folding (Sedan) .....................160
Seatback Release ........................154
Tilting ...............................154
Security Alarm ............................18
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information ..................18
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................15
Sentry Key Programming ....................17
Sentry Key Replacement .....................16
Service Assistance .........................535
Service Contract ..........................538
Service Manuals ..........................540
Settings, Personal .........................237
10
INDEX 559
Setting the Clock..........................245
Shift Lever Override .......................464
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission .............325
Shoulder Belts ............................43
Side Airbag ..............................70
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) ............311
Signals, Turn ............................100
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...................397
Snow Tires ..............................390
Spare Tire...............................391
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................173
Speedometer.............................215
Starting ................................320
Automatic Transmission ..................321
Cold Weather ..........................322
Engine Fails to Start .....................322
Manual Transmission ....................320
Remote ...............................26
Starting Procedures ........................320
Steering
Power ...............................355
Tilt Column ...........................172
Storage ................................517
Storage Bin..............................195
Storage, Vehicle...........................311
Stuck, Freeing............................463
Sun Roof ...............................187
Sun Visor Extension .......................110
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..........61
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................481
System, Remote Starting .....................26
Tachometer..............................217
Taillights ...............................520
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........304
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ............220
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................202
Tilt Steering Column .......................172
560 INDEX
Tire and Loading Information Placard...........381
TIREFIT ................................449
Tire Markings ............................374
Tires ..................................100
Aging (Life of Tires) .....................394
Air Pressure ...........................385
Chains ...............................397
Changing .............................438
Compact Spare .........................391
General Information .....................385
High Speed ...........................388
Inflation Pressures .......................387
Jacking ...............................438
Life of Tires ...........................394
Load Capacity .........................381
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............398
Pressure Warning Light ...................221
Quality Grading ........................541
Radial ...............................389
Replacement ...........................395
Rotation ..............................397
Safety ...............................374
Sizes ................................376
Snow Tires ............................390
Spare Tire .............................439
Spinning .............................393
Trailer Towing .........................426
Tread Wear Indicators ....................394
Tire Safety Information .....................374
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................423
Towing ................................418
24-Hour Towing Assistance ................125
Disabled Vehicle ........................465
Guide ...............................422
Recreational ...........................431
Weight ...............................422
Towing Assistance.........................125
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome ...........431
10
INDEX 561
Trailer Towing ...........................418
Cooling System Tips .....................431
Hitches ..............................421
Minimum Requirements ..................424
Tips.................................429
Trailer and Tongue Weight .................423
Wiring ...............................428
Trailer Towing Guide.......................422
Trailer Weight............................422
Transaxle
Automatic .............................12
Transmission
Automatic ............................326
Fluid ................................500
Manual ..............................323
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .177
Tread Wear Indicators ......................394
Trip Computer ...........................228
Trip Odometer ...........................223
Trip Odometer Reset Button..................221
Turn Signals .............................166
UCI Connector ...........................290
Uconnect®
Advanced Phone Connectivity ..............129
Operation .............................112
Phone Call Features .....................120
Phone Features .........................123
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone ...............................130
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode ........272
Operating Instructions CD Mode ............267
Operating Instructions Radio Mode ..........264
Playing MP3 Files .......................269
Uconnect® 130 With Satellite Radio
Multimedia Satellite Radio .................259
562 INDEX
Operating Instructions CD Mode ............279
Operating Instructions Radio Mode ..........273
Playing MP3 Files .......................281
Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) ...............110
Understanding Your Instrument Panel...........212
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................541
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .290
Universal Transmitter ......................177
Unleaded Gasoline ........................408
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................52
Vanity Mirrors ...........................110
Variance, Compass ........................241
Vehicle Certification Label ...................416
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............7
Vehicle Loading ..........................382
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............8
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........18
Vehicle Storage ...........................311
Voice Command
Commands ............................144
System Operation .......................142
Voice Training .........................148
Voice Recognition System (VR) ................142
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .214
Warning, Roll Over .........................4
Warnings and Cautions.......................7
Warranty Information ......................539
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................488
Washers, Windshield .......................171
Washing Vehicle ..........................506
Wheel and Wheel Trim .....................508
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care .................508
Wind Buffeting ...........................189
Window Fogging .........................311
Windows ................................35
10
INDEX 563
Power ................................35
Windshield Defroster .......................98
Windshield Washers .......................169
Windshield Wiper Blades ....................488
Windshield Wipers ........................169
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................488
Wipers, Intermittent .......................171
564 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into
this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity
to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios
and telephone equipment must be installed prop-
erly by trained personnel. The following must be
observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made
directly to the battery and fused as close to the
battery as possible. The negative power connection
should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the
negative battery connection. This connection
should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on
the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should
be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases.
Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of
the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical
and routed away from the vehicle wiring when pos-
sible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio
to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater
than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible in-
terference between the communications equip-
ment and the vehicle’s electronic systems.
Patriot
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014 Patriot
14MK74-126-AG Seventh Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2014

Navigation menu